Download Samsung PS-42C7SG دليل المستخدم

‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪PDP-‬‬
‫)ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺯﻣﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪SRS TruSurroundXT‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﹰﺍ ﺭﻗﻤ ﹰﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪www.samsung.com/global/register‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:09‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 1‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻣﺜﻠﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (PDP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺯﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”ﺣﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ ‪ ٢٠٠٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻳﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪PDP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻣﺮﹰﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﹰﹶﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ”ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ »ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ« ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺪﺩ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻣﺮﹰﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ‪) ١٫٢٣٠٫٠٠٠‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ (SD -‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٣٫١٥٠٫٠٠٠‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ (HD-‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﹰﺍ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻻ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )‪ ٤١‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ٤:٣‬ﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﻒ ﺫﻛﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﺎﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ”ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ”)‪ (brightness‬ﻭ“ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ“ )‪ (contrast‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ‪AAA‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬
‫)ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ(‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI/DVI‬‬
‫)ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:13‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ(‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ NR‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(Digital NR‬‬
‫‪) SMD‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟـ ‪(DNIe Demo) DNIe‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ )‪(Language‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ )‪(Blue Screen‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻦ )‪(Melody‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Energy Saving‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ"‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٣ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:14‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 3‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪) SOURCE ١‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ(‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ )‪) PC، HDMI‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ((‪.‬‬
‫‪) MENU ٢‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫‪) - ,+ VOL ٣‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪(- ،+‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ - ,+ VOL‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ ‬ﻭ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫‪SEL ٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ ‬ﻭ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪SEL‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫)‪) (ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪) (Power‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬‫ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﻄﻔﺄ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٤ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:15‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 4‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫)ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ,‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(PC IN / AUDIO‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(POWER IN‬‬
‫ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ )‪(SERVICE‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟـ ‪) HDMI/DVI‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪) (HDMI/DVI IN) HDMI/DVI‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI‬ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺨﺮﺝ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﹰ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟـ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.DVI‬‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬‫‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻫﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻌﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ HDMI/DVI 50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ HDMI/DVI 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪٤٨٠i‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪٤٨٠p‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪٥٧٦i‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪٥٧٦p‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪٧٢٠p‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪١٠٨٠i‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟـ ‪ DVI‬ﺃﻳﺴﺮ‪/‬ﺃﻳﻤﻦ )‪) (DVI AUDIO IN L/R‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ ﻣﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪)DVI‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٥ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:19‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 5‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪POWER‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ “PDP‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٢‬‬
‫‪ ٢٣‬ﺍﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ٢٦‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٢٧‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢٨‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ )‪(PIP‬‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﲔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﳌﺪﺓ ‪ ٣~٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﲔ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪ ١١‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠‬‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬
‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٣‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪ ١٣‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ“‬
‫‪ ١٤‬ﺯﺭ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ‪“TruSurround XT‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪Samsung‬‬
‫‪((TV, DVD, STB, CABLE, VCR‬‬
‫)ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪ ١٧‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪ ١٨‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٩‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ ٢١‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪VCR/DVD‬‬
‫)‪) Rewind‬ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ(‪) Stop ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) Play/Pause‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) Fast/Forward‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ((‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﻩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻤﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﻢ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٦ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:23‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 6‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪.AAA‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ”‪ “+‬ﻭ”–“ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻗﺪﻡ‪) .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،PDP‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ! ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪PDP‬؟‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ؟‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻫﻞ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ؟‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ؟‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻫﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ؟‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،PDP‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻬﻮ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫)‪ (Power‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ( ) POWER‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ (Power‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ( ) POWER‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)‪ (Power‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،PDP‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ ( ) POWER‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٧ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:24‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 7‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪PC :‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.( ) MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ )‪ (Input‬ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (Picture‬ﻭﺻﻮﺕ )‪ (Sound‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫)‪.((Setup‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ( ) ENTER‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >><< ﺃﻭ >><< ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ( ) ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ///‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ( ) MENU‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪."STILL‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٨ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:26‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 8‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ )‪.(Source List‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫‪PC :‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪) HDMI ،PC :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫‪---- :‬‬
‫‪---- :‬‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SOURCE‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ PC‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ )‪ (Edit Name‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.( ) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.( ) ENTER‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ VCR :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ D-VHS‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Cable STB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HD STB‬ﺃﻭ ‪Satellite‬‬
‫‪ STB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ AV Receiver‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD Receiver‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Game‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Camcorder‬ﺃﻭ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ Combo‬ﺃﻭ ‪) DHR‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ (DVD HDD‬ﺃﻭ ‪.PC‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪PC :‬‬
‫( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ )‪.(Input‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫‪----‬‬
‫‪VCR‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪D-VHS‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫‪---- :‬‬
‫‪---- :‬‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٩ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:28‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 9‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪NR‬‬
‫‪SMD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟـ ‪DNIe‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫‪16:9 :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ ،(Picture‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫( ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )‪ ،(Dynamic‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )‪ ،(Standard‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ )‪،(Movie‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪(Custom‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ G 50‬ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪1‬‬
‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ PC :‬ﺃﻭ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ((‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ P.MODE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )‪ (Dynamic‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )‪ (Standard‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ )‪ (Movie‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪ (Custom‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪NR‬‬
‫‪SMD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟـ ‪DNIe‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫‪16:9 :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ ،(Picture‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺓﺑﺎﺭﺩ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ G 50‬ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ‪1‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ‪2‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫( ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )‪ ،(Dynamic‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )‪ ،(Standard‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ )‪ ،(Movie‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)‪(Custom‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ )‪ ،(Contrast‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ )‪ ،(Brightness‬ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪ ،(Sharpness‬ﻟﻮﻥ )‪ ،(Colour‬ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ )‪ Tint) (NTSC‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ )‪ - (Contrast‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ )‪ - (Brightness‬ﻟﻮﻥ )‪” :(Colour‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ :(Colour Tone‬ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪/(Cool2) 2‬ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪/(Cool1) 1‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )‪/(Normal‬ﺩﺍﻓﻰﺀ‪/(Warm1) 1‬ﺩﺍﻓﻰﺀ‪(Warm2) 2‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪ :(Reset‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٠ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:30‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 10‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ ،(Picture‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ )‪ ،(Size‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،١٦:٩ :‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ،(Wide 4:3) ٤:٣‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪٤:٣،Zoom‬‬
‫‪ :١٦:٩ ‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪.١٦:٩‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪ :(Wide 4:3) ٤:٣‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ‪.٤:٣‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪.( ) ENTER‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ )‪ :(Zoom‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳ ﹰﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :٤:٣ ‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ‪.٤:٣‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪NR‬‬
‫‪SMD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟـ ‪DNIe‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫‪16:9 :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪4:3‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪4:3‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ P.SIZE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﻱ »ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪ (Wide 4:3) «٤:٣‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ“ )‪ (Zoom‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ )‪ (Zoom‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺮﹺﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﺃﺳ ﹰﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ NR‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪) SMD / (Digital NR‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻤﺔ( ‪ /‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟـ ‪(DNIe Demo) DNIe‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ ،(Picture‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ NR :‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪) SMD ،(Digital NR‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻤﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟـ ‪(DNIe Demo) DNIe‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪NR‬‬
‫‪SMD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟـ ‪DNIe‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫‪16:9 :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ NR‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ :(Digital NR‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪(On/Off‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪) SMD‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻤﺔ(‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪) SMD‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻤﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ‪) SMD‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻤﺔ( ﻓﻲ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟـ ‪ :(DNIe Demo) DNIe‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪(On/Off‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ DNIe‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟـ ‪ ،DNIe‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ DNIe‬ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪) DNIeTM‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼﹰ‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮ ﹰﻋﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻭﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼﹰ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ DNIeTM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟـ ‪ (DNIe Demo) DNIe‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١١ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:32‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 11‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪SRS TSXT‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ )‪ ،(Sound‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫> ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ“ <‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ )‪ :(Mode‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )‪ / (Standard‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ )‪ / (Music‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎ )‪ / (Movie‬ﺧﻄﺎﺏ‬
‫)‪ / (Speech‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪(Custom‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻚ ﻟﺒﺚ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ S.MODE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ )‪ :(Equalizer‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ )‪ ١٠٠/(Balance‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ٣٠٠/‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ١/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ٣/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ١٠/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪SRS TSXT‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ )‪ ،(Mode‬ﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ )‪ ،SRS TSXT ،(Equalizer‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪Auto‬‬
‫‪ ،(Volume‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪) (Reset‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ“(‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ »ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ« ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)‪.(Custom‬‬
‫‪ :SRS TSXT‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪(On/Off‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ TruSurround XT‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺼﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺒﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ‪ SRS‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻱ ‪ 5.1‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ TruSurround‬ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﻭﺭﺍﺋﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .PDP‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎ ﹰﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SRS‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪ TruSurround XT‬ﻭ ‪SRS‬ﻭﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .SRS Labs, Inc‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪TruSurround XT‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SRS Labs, Inc‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ :(Auto Volume‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪(On/Off‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺑﺚ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﻓﻠﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪(Reset‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ »ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ«‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ »ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ«‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ”ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ“ )‪ (Reset‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٢ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:37‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 12‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ )‪ / (Language‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ )‪ / (Blue Screen‬ﻟﺤﻦ )‪ / (Melody‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Energy Saving‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻐﺔ )‪ ،(Language‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ )‪ ،(Game Mode‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ )‪،(Blue Screen‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻦ )‪ ،PC ،(Melody‬ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪،(Energy Saving‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )‪Blue Eye ،(Screen Burn Protection‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ‬
‫ﳊﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ )‪ :(Blue Screen‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪(On/Off‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ )‪ (Blue Screen‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪.(Off‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻦ )‪ :(Melody‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪(On/Off‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﺤﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪ :(Energy Saving‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪/(Off‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )‪/(Low‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ )‪/(Medium‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(High‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪ :(Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Energy Saving‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )‪ :(Low‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ )‪ :(Medium‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻦ »ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ« ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ :(High‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﻦ »ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ« ﺑﻐﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ E.SAVING‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ“‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺐ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ PlayStationTM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،XboxTM‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺐ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬‬
‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ )‪ ،(Game Mode‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪ (Off‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ (On‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ‬
‫ﳊﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺐ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ »ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ« ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ“‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻼﹰ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ“ ‪:‬‬
‫‪‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ »ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ« ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )‪ (Custom‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ »ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ« ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ »ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ«‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ”ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ“ )‪ (Reset‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٣ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:41‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 13‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ”ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ“ )‪ (Vertical Line‬ﻭﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ”ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ“‬
‫)‪ . (Horizontal Dot‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪Blue Eye‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﳕﻂ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )‪،(Screen Burn Protection‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.( ) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >><< ﺃﻭ >><< ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ )‪ ،(Pixel Shift‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ )‪،(All White‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ )‪(Signal Pattern‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪4:‬‬
‫‪4:‬‬
‫‪4:‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ )‪ :(Pixel Shift‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ )‪ (Pixel Shift‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ (On‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.( ) ENTER‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ )‪ ،(Horizontal Dot‬ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ )‪ ،(Vertical Line‬ﻭﻗﺖ )‪(Time‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ؛‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ )‪(Horizontal Dot‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ )‪(Vertical Line‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ )‪)(Time‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ )‪ :(All White‬ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ )‪ :(Signal Pattern‬ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ PDP‬ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ )‪ (All White‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ )‪.(Signal Pattern‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ )‪ (Signal Pattern‬ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ( ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺤﺴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٤ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:44‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 14‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﻫﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Blue Eye‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪ (Off‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ (On‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪Blue Eye‬‬
‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‪ :(Off‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ :(On‬ﻳﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﹰ‬
‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﺎﻟ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻺﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨ ﹶﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪ Windows‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ,‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪(.Samsung‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ )‪(Properties‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.(Display Properties‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )‪ (Settings tab‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ )‪ .(Advanced‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (Monitor‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (Screen refresh rate‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺳﻌﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪.(Screen refresh rate‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ )‪ (OK‬ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ )‪ (OK‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.(Display Properties‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٥ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:46‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 15‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺩﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫)ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪(X‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻄﺎﺏ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﻄﺎﺏ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫‪640 x 350‬‬
‫‪720 x 400‬‬
‫‪70.086‬‬
‫‪70.087‬‬
‫‪59.940‬‬
‫‪70.000‬‬
‫‪72.809‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪56.250‬‬
‫‪60.317‬‬
‫‪70.000‬‬
‫‪72.188‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪60.000‬‬
‫‪74.769‬‬
‫‪60.004‬‬
‫‪70.069‬‬
‫‪72.000‬‬
‫‪75.029‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪35.000‬‬
‫‪37.861‬‬
‫‪37.500‬‬
‫‪35.156‬‬
‫‪37.879‬‬
‫‪43.750‬‬
‫‪48.077‬‬
‫‪46.875‬‬
‫‪31.020‬‬
‫‪37.684‬‬
‫‪48.363‬‬
‫‪56.476‬‬
‫‪57.672‬‬
‫‪60.023‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N/P‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N/P‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪N/P‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N/P‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N/P‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N/P‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪N/P‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪N/P‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‪IBM PC /‬‬
‫‪AT‬‬
‫‪800 x 600‬‬
‫‪848 x 480‬‬
‫‪1024 x 768‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ‪ p/i٤٨٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ p/i٥٧٦‬ﺃﻭ ‪ p٧٢٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ i١٠٨٠‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ٨٤٨ × ٤٨٠) WVGA‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫)‪ :N‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ‪ :P /‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٦ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:46‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 16‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪ (PC‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SOURCE‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) MENU‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪ ،(PC‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ ،(Image Lock‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ )‪ ،(Position‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪Auto‬‬
‫‪ ،(Adjustment‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(Image Reset‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ :(Image Lock‬ﺧﺸﻦ )‪/(Coarse‬ﻧﺎﻋﻢ )‪(Fine‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫�ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ )ﺧﺸﻦ( ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺸﻦ )‪ (Coarse‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ )‪ (Fine‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.( ) ENTER‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.( ) ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ )‪:(Position‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﺀﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪:(Auto Adjustment‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪:(Image Reset‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺐ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ‬
‫ﳊﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﺧﺸﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ PC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٧ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:49‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 17‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung Electronics‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﻨﺘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﻭﺃﺟﺰﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ‪EA 4 :‬‬
‫‪1EA‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪1EA :‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪1EA :‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ‪EA 4 :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ(‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻋﺮﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎ ﹰﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻑ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺇﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٨ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:52‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 18‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ )ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ (٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻟﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ) ‪ ( ٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ) ‪ ( ١‬ﻭﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ) ‪ ( ٢‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪PDP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺭﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺇﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ )ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.(PDP‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪PDP‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،PDP‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ )‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺘﻴﻦ( ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫�ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫) ‪.( ٢‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺑﺎﺑﻴﺲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺑﺎﺑﻴﺲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪١٩ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:55‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 19‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ VCR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SET‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٢‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ”‪) .“٠‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪(.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫”‪ ٠٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.“٠٨٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ”ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ“ )‪ ،(VCR‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ CABLE‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SET‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ”‪.“٠‬‬
‫)ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪(.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ”‪ ٠٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.“٠٤٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪) Cable Box :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ”ﻛﺒﻞ“ )‪ ،(CABLE‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٠ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:57‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 20‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SET‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ”‪) .“٠‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪(.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻣﻦ ”‪ ٠٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.“١٤١‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ”ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،(DVD) “DVD‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ STB‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SET‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ”‪) .“٠‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪(.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ”‪ ٠٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.“٠٧٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪) STB :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ”ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ“ )‪ ،(STB‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.PDP‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢١ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:01:59‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 21‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
046 041 034 019
020
025 002
038 025 005 002
064 062 037 026 018 008 007
020
072 071 056 021
075 041 019
008
059 056 021
080 021
053 039 026 019
055 049 015
017
018
056 021
056 048 034 029 025 024 021 020 018 006
076 068 057 043 041 035 021 019 017 002
026
024 018
067 052 047 003
051 048 041 029 028 024 019 018 006
015 045 034 020
058 038 033 027
025
044 033 027
059 056 025 021
025
025 018
006
037
068 037 025
021
031 025 021 006
066
052 051 029 019 003
006 002
002
026 007
026
026 007
002
041 038 034 025 024 021 020 019 006 003 002
037 026 018 008 007
033 027 023
MITSUBISHI
MONTGOMERY WARD
MTC
MULTITECH
NEC
OPTIMUS
PANASONIC
PENTAX
+PENTEX RESEARCH
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PORTLAND
PROSCAN
QUARTZ
QUASAR
RADIO SHACK/REALISTIC
RCA
SANSUI
SANYO
SCOTT
SEARS
SHARP
SHIMTOM
SIGNATURE
SONY
SYLVANIA
SYMPHONIC
TANDY
TASHIKA
TATUNG
TEAC
TECHNICS
TEKNIKA
TMK
TOSHIBA
TOTEVISION
UNITECH
VECTOR RESEARCH
VICTOR
VIDEO CONCEPTS
VIDEOSONIC
WARDS
YAMAHA
ZENITH
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
079 078 077 005 004 003 002 001 000
SAMSUNG
020
ADMIRAL
025
AIWA
032 027 004
AKAI
026 007 AUDIO DYNAMICS
018
BELL&HOWELL
022
BROKSONIC
055 015 008 006 003 002
CANDLE
056 021
CANON
055 015 008 006 003 002
CITIZEN
007
COLORTYME
024 002
CRAIG
066 064 056 025 021 017 008 007 002 CURTIS MATHES
016 015 014 013 012 011 010 003
DAEWOO
026 007
DB
017
DIMENSIA
025
DYNATECH
034 ELECTROHOME
040 034 032 030 025 022 021 006 003 001
EMERSON
073 069 067 066 065 063 060 052 050 047
061 051 048 029 028 024 018
FISHER
025
FUNAI
056 021 017 005 002 GENERAL ELECTRIC
002
GO VIDEO
010 009 008 007 006
LG(Goldstar)
007 HARMAN KARDON
074 042 041 025 019
HITACHI
021 INSTANT REPLAY
056 054 041 037 026 021 019 018 007 002
JC PENNEY
037 026 021 018 008 007
JCL
037 026 018 008 007
KENWOOD
070
KLH
025
LIOYD
038
LOGIK
025
LXI
083 082 081
JVC
059 056 021
MAGNAVOX
062 037 026 021 018 008 007
MARANTZ
006
MARTA
036
KONIA
076 075 074 073
ORION
021
MEI
025 024 021 006
MEMOREX
034
MGA
005
MIDLAND
075 041 019
MINOLTA
...‫ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
٢٢ - ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 22
2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:02:01
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺑﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
007 006 005 004 003 002 001 000
041
031 024 003
030 025
039 038
030 025
028 023 019
026
044 037 027 022 003
028 023 021 019
044 020 018 004
040 022 014
003
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
023 015
REGENCY
043 042
SA
043 042 SCIENTIFIC ATLAN
022
SPRUCER
036 STARGATE 2000
016
SYLVANIA
016
TEXSCAN
032
TOCOM
034 033
UNIVERSAL
028 023 021 019
VIEWSTAR
046
WAMER AMEX
045 037 035 029 017
ZENITH
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
SAMSUNG
GI
HAMLIN
HITACHI
JERROLD
MACOM
MAGNAVOX
OAK
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
RCA
REGAL
SAMSUNG ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
010
011
012
013
014
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
002 001
Ground wave STB
003
Satellite STB
004
CABLE STB
008
STB DVD COMBO
009 Satellite STB HDD COMBO Standard
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
Satellite STB HDD COMBO Premium
CABLE STB HDD COMBO Standard
CABLE STB HDD COMBO Premium
Ground wave STB HDD COMBO Standard
Ground wave STB HDD COMBO Premium
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
073 044
042 041 040 039 038 036 021 016
016
064
018
015
064 048 047
067 042 041 040 039 038 036 033 021 017 016 015
063 050 049 046
062 061 059 058
016
066 065
066 065 053 052 051
064
057
027 020
026
031
007 006 005
064
064
060 054
072 030 029 028 017 015
066 060
057 056 055 037 021 016
068 031 024
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
LG(Goldstar)
MAGNAVOX
MEMOREX
MOTOROLA
MACOM
MITSUBISHI
NEXT LEVEL
PHILIPS
PRIMESTAR
PANASONIC
PAYSAT
PROSCAN
RCA
RADIOSHACK
REALISTIC
STS
STAR TRAK
SKY
SKY LIFE
SHACK
STAR CHOICE
SONY
TOSHIBA
ULTIMATE TV
UNIDEN
ZENITH
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
023
ALPHASTAR
043
ANAM
034 018 CHANNEL MASTER
019
CROSSDIGITAL
035
CHAPARRAL
062 061 060 045 022 019 017 016 015
DIRECT TV
068 067 066 065
074
DAEWOO
070 069 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
069
DISHPRO
032 024 018
DRAKE
027
DX ANTENNA
071 070 069 025
ECHOSTAR
069
EXPRESSVU
069
GOI
065
GE
064 063 048 047 046 GENERAL INSTRUMENT
069
HTS
056
HOME CABLE
022
HITACHI
017 015 HUGHES NETWORK
020
IQ
020
IQ PRISM
059
JANEIL
063
JERROID
070 069
JVC
...‫ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
٢٣ - ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 23
2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:02:03
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
SAMSUNG ‫ ﻣﻦ‬DVD ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
016 015 014
017
018
019
020
021
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
Home Theater VCR COMBO
HDD Record COMBO
TWIN TRAY COMBO
STB DVD COMBO
DVD Receiver
AV Receiver
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
002 001 000
004 003
006 005
011 010 009 008 007
012
013
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
DVD
DVDR
BD Record
VCR COMBO
VCR Record
DHR COMBO
DVD ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
050 049 048
NORCENT
052
NEXT BASE
053
NEC
144
NANTAUS
074
NESA
105 OPTOMEDIA ELECTRONICS
072
OPTIVIEW
119 092 076
ONKYO
045 044
PHILCO
047 046
PRINCETON
023
PROSCAN
138 137 136 134 124 034 024
PANASONIC
076 036
PHILIPS
118 117
ROTEL
120
RIO
132 131 075 074 035 023
RCA
073
RAITE
038
ROWA
104
SAMPO
141 130 129 128 127 126 029 026
SONY
041 039
SHERWOOD
042
SVA
093 043
SYLVANIA
140
SHARP
062
SANSUI
062
SANYO
094
SHINSONIC
090
SANYO
145
THOMSON
076 062 028
TOSHIBA
139
TECHNICS
072
TVIEW
073
TOKAI
096
TEAC
097
TECHWOOD
101 099 098
TREDEX
076
URBAN CONCEPTS
075
VENTURER
102
VOCOPRO
063 032
YAMAHA
073 040
YAMAKAWA
103
XWAVE
121 076
ZENITH
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
030
075
085
072
112 111 088 084 083 086 074 071 070
114
062
074
123 122
027
082 079 078 077 065
125 080
081
095
066
146
068 067
090
060
135 133 089 061
074 069
074
113 064
071
073
110 091
089
092
091
116 115 033 022
073
109 108 051
073
107 106 100 059
075 074
031 025
057
058
054
055
056
093 076
094 074
073
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
ANAM
AUDIOVOX
AUDIOLOGIC
ANABA
APEX DIGITAL
AIWA
BROKSONIC
BLAUPUNKT
B&K
CURTIS MATHES
CYBER HOME
CLARION
CIRRUS
CINEVISION
DAEWOO
DENON
FARENHEIT
FISHER
GPX
GO VIDEO
GE
GREENHILL
HITACHI
HITEKER
HOYO
HARMAN / KARDON
IRT
INTEGRA
JBL
JVC
JATON
KENWOOD
KISS
KONKA
KLH
(LG(Goldstar
LOEWE
LASONIC
MOBILE AUTHORITY
MEMOREX
MALATA
MAGNAVOX
MINTEK
MONYKA
٢٤ - ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 24
2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:02:04
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ,Samsung‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ,‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻭﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ (Power‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪POWER‬‬
‫) ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MUTE‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻭﺣﺮﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﻴ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻪ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻏﺎﻟ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﻦ ”‪ “+‬ﻭ”–“ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺟﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ PDP‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﻤﺎ( ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Source‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ PDP‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪٢٥ -‬‬
‫‪2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:02:05‬‬
‫‪BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 25‬‬
BN68-00848J-01arabic.indd 28
2006-05-26 ¿ÀÀü 11:02:05